Revit 2010 Imperial Tutorial | Autodesk Revit | Building Information Modeling

Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.Introduction In this tutorial.

2 .

3 . electrical panels. and plumbing fixtures. Germany. Add more detailed modelling elements.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. and piping. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. electrical. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. and plumbing engineering workflows. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. such as duct. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Add basic MEP elements. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. fixtures. such as mechanical equipment.

In this exercise. When you open a training file. annotations. Create detail views. Metric: files for users working with metric units. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. However. templates. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. you can choose to save your work. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. you learn where the training files are located. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. and tags. On the Contents tab. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Contact your CAD manager for more information. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. Create schedules. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. You do not design entire systems. When you install the training files as instructed. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. After completing each exercise. your Training folder may be in a different location. and sheets to document the project. is located and accessed in the training files location. as well as how to open and save them. For example. So. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Metric file names have an _m suffix. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. For example. NOTE Depending on your installation. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. such as templates and families. to provide a richer and more finished design. views. when you add ductwork. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. however.

NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. enter the new file name. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. For example. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. and you can open any supported file type. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. You may close the file with or without saving changes. select the folder in which to save the new file. double-click Imperial or Metric. and click the Training Files icon. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file.rvt) is selected. click ➤ Save As. 8 If you have made changes. a list of file types displays. the Open dialog displays. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes.rvt and make changes. For File name. Accessing Training Files | 5 . and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. verify that Project Files (*. 3 In the right pane. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. 4 Click the training file name. and click Save. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. if you open settings. you are prompted to save the changes. scroll down. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

6 .

The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. If you move the partition. sections. and plans. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the parameter is one of association or connection. quantities. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. ■ ■ 7 . the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the operation of the software is parametric. 2D and 3D view. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. You learn the terminology. In the Revit MEP model. the hierarchy of elements. the floor or roof remains connected. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and phases when you need it. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. schedules. and schedules required for a building project. scope. As you work in drawing and schedule views.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. drawings. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. every drawing sheet. the door retains this relationship to the partition. hence. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. In this case. drawing sheets. If the length of the elevation is changed. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. In this case. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation.

and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and keynotes are annotation elements. boilers. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. tags. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. For example. and electrical panels. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. grids. tags. For example. For example. When you change something. walls and ceilings are hosts. and 2D detail components. ducts. Examples include detail lines. levels. sinks. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. sinks. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. sprinklers. filled regions. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. ducts. sprinklers. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. dimensions. boilers. and reference planes are datum elements. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. They display in relevant views of the design. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. They help to describe or document the design. Datum elements help to define project context. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. dimensions. and electrical panels. For example.

Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. If you can draw. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. North . For example. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. families. such as roofs. or bottom of foundation. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. By using a single project file. and drawings of the design. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. and ceilings. programming is not required. However. and types. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. views of the project. In Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. schedules. Often. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. To place levels. for example. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. section views. and so forth). by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. top of wall. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. The project file contains all information for the building design. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. from geometry to construction data. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. elevation views. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. first floor. Project: In Revit MEP.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. floors. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. In other cases. you can explicitly control them. This information includes components used to design the model. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Most often. you must be in a section or elevation view. you do nothing to establish these relationships. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals.

pipes. System families can be transferred between projects.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. For example. For example. Type: Each family can have several types. hiding. You can also display several project views at one time. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. identical use. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. A type can also be a style. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. For example. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. each in-place family contains only a single type. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. showing. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. With a few clicks. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. such as a 30” X 42” title block. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. System families include ducts. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. or layer the views to see only the one on top. A type can be a specific size of a family. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. and wires. However. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Then experiment with them. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. Unlike system and standard component families. and similar graphical representation.

Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. To return the panel to the ribbon.

Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools used for editing existing elements. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools used for running analysis on the current design. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools used for managing and modifying the current view.. and for switching views. architect-specific tools.. project and system parameters. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. When working on the Modify tab. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select the tool first. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. and CAD files. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. and settings. data and systems. then select what you want to modify. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements.

closes the application menu (double-click). an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. By default. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. For example. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. provides access to common tools. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. displays frequently used tools. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. To keep a panel expanded. when adding duct. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . provides requested information. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click).

. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. click.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Save As) export the current drawing. select a file to open.. (Open) save the current drawing.. (Export) On the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. such as Export and Publish.

click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. (Publish) print the current drawing. publish the current project. saves a current project.On the application menu. To enable or disable a tool item. click. or template file.. to. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. family.. Camera. annotation... (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . or template file. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. annotation. (Print) access product and license information. provides views including Default 3D. (Licensing) close the file. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. family. but is not enabled by default. and Walkthrough.

NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Clipboard.To undo or redo a series of operations. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. check the Status Bar. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Starting with the most recent command. or the Family Editor. However. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Modify. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Group. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. To hide the Status Bar. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. When you are using a command. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). To show the Status Bar again. displaying the same information. repeat the command. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Clear the Status Bar check mark. When you are highlighting an element or component. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. This displays the command history in a list. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. when you switch to another editing mode. workshared components. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. In addition.

do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. On the Quick Access toolbar. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements.To cancel or exit the current command. for example. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. click (Modify). It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. select one or more elements of the same category. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. To change existing elements to a different type. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Place a Wall. When you place an element in a drawing. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add.

(The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Zoom the view In the tutorials. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click Training Files.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. For example.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. After you are familiar with these tasks. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 1 Click ➤ Open.rvt. In the following steps. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. There are several ways to access zoom options. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.

Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. In the drawing area. Modifying the View | 19 . use a zoom menu command to zoom out. To modify or add snap increments. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. this is referred to as a crossing selection. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). If you do not have a wheel mouse. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 9 To display SteeringWheels. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. When you release the mouse button. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. on the Navigation bar. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. NOTE As you zoom in and out. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. click . the view zooms in on the selected area. 6 Click in the drawing area.

moving the wheel to the desired location. click the SteeringWheels tab. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 11 Click and hold the mouse button. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. Click and drag to orbit the design. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. ➤ Options.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. For more information about SteeringWheels. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. As you move the mouse. 14 To exit the wheel. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and then using the Zoom tool again. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. press ESC. and click tin the Options dialog.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . When drawing or modifying an MEP design.Design. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . bottoms. display along the ends. and open Level 2 . Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. Similar controls. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. These are the drag controls. and select the duct. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.HVAC Plan . it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. called drag controls.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. After you are familiar with these tasks. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. as shown. referred to as shape handles. Small blue dots. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter ZR.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view.

click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). on the Standard toolbar. click the Undo command. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. In this example. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. All changes you make to a project are tracked. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Move. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. select the first item in the list. 6 On the Undo menu. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. or press CTRL+Z. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.3 Click and drag the bottom control.

In this case. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . 10 Move the cursor to the right. After selecting the element to move. Some commands. The duct is moved to the new position. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 11 With the duct already selected. require 2 clicks to complete the command. and drag it to the left as shown. click to specify the starting position. you want to move the duct.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. such as Move and Copy. as shown. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. and click again to specify the ending position. for example.

End a command Some commands. Press ESC twice. 14 Enter VG. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. 13 To end a command. Select Mechanical . Click OK. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Return. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . such as the Modify Ducts command.Supply. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. For example.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

6 Click OK. You can choose from several templates.rte template. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. link files.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. create and manage views. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. 2 In the New Project dialog. and click Open. you learn how to start a project from a template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. You can either select a template from the template library. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. In that case. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. 27 . under Create new. system families. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. select Project. the default building levels and standard views. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. such as ducts and pipes. settings. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. such as the default project units and settings. 5 In the New Project dialog. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. such as coordination review and interference checking. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Finally. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. use copy/monitor. under Template file. click Training files. New projects inherit all the families. and modify system settings. and geometry from the starting template. and loadable families.

under Energy Analysis. select Level 1. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. select Manchester. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. navigate to Imperial Templates. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information.7 In the Project Browser. for Energy Data. In the Choose Template dialog. click (Browse). select School or University. Click OK twice. select Project template. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. ■ For Building Construction. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. Click OK. For Location. and open North. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Click Cancel. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. create another new project using the Construction template. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Using the same method. 8 In the drawing area.rte template and click Open. If you want to use a template other than the default. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. click Browse. For example. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . NH. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. review the construction materials listed. ■ ■ Under Create new. you can select it now. click Edit. When you select the material. for City. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. (Browse).

29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 24 In the right pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. Click OK twice. plumbing. and demand factors for electrical systems. 5 1/2". and 12 1/2".rfa and click Open. 33 Click OK. 11 1/2". wiring. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. click Sizes. 26 In the right pane. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. click Round. Holding CTRL. select Identity Data.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 27 Click OK. 10 1/2". under Duct Settings. power distribution systems. under Duct Settings. 4 1/2". for 3/4". Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. piping. and 5 1/2". Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. for 3 1/2". Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. under Pipe Settings. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. After standard settings have been established for an organization. For Categories. 25 In the left pane. 22 In the right pane. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 4 1/2". select Views. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. click Wiring. 23 In the left pane. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. and fire protection systems. for 3 1/2". click Rectangular.

synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 38 Close the file. In addition. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. select Sub-Discipline. 4 In the New Project dialog. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. under Create new.rvt. select Associated Level. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. To enable this coordination. Click Open. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 2 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click OK. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. families. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. and groups that are contained in a project. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. For Then by. sheets. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . you link the architectural model with the MEP model. select View Name. Notice that the file is saved as a template. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. From the Positioning list. select Auto .Origin to Origin. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. Linking Projects In this exercise. select Project. For Then by. select Family and Type. under Template file. For Sort by. click Training. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. select Type/Discipline and click Edit.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 15 Under Library Name. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. or families. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog.11 In the Places dialog. click (Add Value). 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and select it as the library path. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click Open. Load. templates. and click (Browse). and Import dialogs. and click OK twice. and change the name to My Library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. click My Library. Save. ➤ Open. click the My Library icon.

click Places. custom color files. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. and decal image files. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 3 Under Settings. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. This path is determined during installation. 19 Click Cancel. view the current path. 12 Create a new project using the default template. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 2 In the Options dialog. click OK. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 21 On the File Locations tab. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 5 In the text editor. If you work in a large office. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 11 In the Options dialog. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. If you want to relocate this path. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. click the Spelling tab. 23 Click 24 Click OK. click Edit. 27 Click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 9 In the text editor. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 20 Click ➤ Options. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. click Edit. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. select Ignore words in uppercase. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 22 Select My Library. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. specify the new location here. such as bump maps. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 14 Click in the drawing area. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances.

click Restore Defaults. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 24 In the Options dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 23 In the text editor. work with snapping turned off. 21 Under Personal dictionary. You can turn snap settings on and off. 22 In the text editor. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Browse. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click Training Files. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. click OK. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 6 In the Snaps dialog. click the Spelling tab. under Template file. In this exercise. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click OK.rte. 25 Close the file without saving it. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 18 Click ➤ Options. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click File menu ➤ Save. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . 19 In the Options dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Close. click Edit. and enter 1 . you modify snap increments. under Dimension Snaps. you modify snap settings. 20 Under Settings. As you zoom in and out within a view. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.. delete sheetmtl-CU.17 In the Spelling dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.

9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. such as ZO to zoom out. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching.7 Under Object Snaps. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. and move the cursor to the right. 10 On the Options Bar. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . If you do not have a wheel button. TIP To zoom while sketching. While sketching. snapping reverts to the system default settings. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. click OK. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 8 In the Snaps dialog. use the wheel button on your mouse. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. enter SM. If it does not. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. deselect Chain. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. For example. zoom out until it does so. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. This is the increment that you added previously. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys.

15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. with or without saving it.. Do not set the wall end point. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and delete the value 1’ . 19 Enter SM.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. 22 Move the cursor downward. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 25 Click OK. 26 Close the file. and specify the wall endpoint. and move the cursor to the right. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. and the wall edges. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. If you move the cursor along the wall. the midpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. it will snap to the endpoints. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .

44 .

This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. go to http://www. water source heat pump (WSHP). After finishing each exercise. you will understand the process. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. At the end of the tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you first plan the system. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. If the tutorial training files are not present. However. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you first configure the linked architectural model. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. methodology. In this exercise. duct system and a hydronic piping system. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. As you create the mechanical system. and then you create a plenum level.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. 45 . By following the recommended workflow. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In this lesson.autodesk. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you can choose to save your work. This system consists of a cooling tower. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises.

1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this section. select Room Bounding. and after the linked model highlights. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. not in the MEP training file. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. under Constraints. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. These components are defined in the architectural training file. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. Next. you add a level for plenums. and click OK.Space Plan is highlighted. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. roof. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . ceilings.rvt. NOTE When working with a linked file. click Training Files. click to select it.

14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 16 Press Esc. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . Click Plan View Types. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level).6 In the Project Browser. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and enter Level 2 Plenum.MEP. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and in the Plan View Types dialog. and double-click West . 9 On the Draw panel. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. The new level is placed. For Offset. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. enter 8'.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and click OK.

NOTE After finishing each exercise. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied.Plenum. and then place spaces in various types of areas. select Design. Under View Depth. for View Range. enter an Offset of 1' 0". ■ Click OK twice. you can choose to save your work. In this exercise. In the next exercise. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . for Top. enter 0. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. for Default View Template. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. Under Extents. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for View Scale. right-click Level 2 Plenum. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. and click Properties. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Edit. For Cut plane. and for Offset. Under Identity Data. For Sub-Discipline.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. select MEP . verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. For View Classification. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Apply Default View Template. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you place spaces in areas of the building model. for Level. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. However. select Plenum Plan. In this exercise. select Level Above (Level 3). right-click Level 2 Plenum. 20 In the Project Browser.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Placing Spaces | 49 . select Horizontal. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. select New. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Space.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. enter 0. select Level 2 Plenum. walls. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. For Offset.Space Plan is highlighted. and ceilings). You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. For (Tag Location). For Upper Limit. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.

■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. For Name. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. Click OK. 9 Select the space.7 Click to place the space. ensuring coordination between the files. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Number. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Library. 14 In the drawing area. enter 219.

demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. select Level 3. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. enter 0.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 21 Using the method learned previously. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For Offset. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Placing Spaces | 51 . For Upper Limit. and then click Modify. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time.

and then split the space using a space separation line. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. you place a space in a large corridor area. 25 Close the file with or without saving it.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. under Energy Analysis. 23 Click OK. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

indicating that it’s the active view. enter 0. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 On the Options Bar. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and for Offset. click Training Files. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. for Upper Limit. select Level 3. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.Space Plan is highlighted.

In the schedule. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. as shown. and press Enter. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. which was numbered 219Q. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 11 Close the schedule view. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. the plan view would have updated with the changes. double-click the space name. enter Corridor. change the space number to 216A. 9 In the floor plan.7 In the Project Browser. and scroll to the newly placed space. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 10 Using the same method.

with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. place a space in the lower area of the split space.15 Press Esc twice. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 Using the method learned previously.

click Training Files. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. If necessary. you place a space in a chase. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Space Plan is highlighted. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

enter 225PC. expand Spaces. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. Under Identity Data. for Name. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . for Upper Limit. select Level 3. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select Interior and Reference. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 4'. select the space. for Upper Limit. 10 In the plan view. For Limit Offset. In the plan view. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. On the Options Bar. For Offset. enter 0. enter Chase. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click in the chase area to place the space. and click Element Properties. 12 Click in the section view. right-click. and then click OK.4 Press Esc. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. For Number. 6 Enter VG. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. select Roof Level.

the space displays the volume up to the roof only. All spaces in the view are tagged. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. ceilings.Bounding elements (such as walls. 17 Type ZF. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. In the next exercises. 15 Press Esc. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. under Loaded Tags. and maximize the view. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. select Space Tag With Volume. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. floors.Space Plan. and click OK.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click View ➤ Zones. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. which removes the space from the Default zone. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Training Files. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. After a space is placed in an area. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. it is automatically added to the Default zone. To display space reference lines. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 .Zoning is highlighted. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. under Spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Notice that Default is currently the only zone. In this exercise. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. click Reference. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. select Occupiable. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. 4 In the drawing area. Instruction 221. To display space reference lines. indicating that it’s the active view. The Zone tool is active. and Electrical 220 spaces. under Spaces. Using the Edit Zone tab. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.rvt. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Energy Analysis. and modify the zone properties. double-click 121 Cafeteria. and verify the zones in the System Browser. you assign spaces to a zone. and click Finish Editing Zone. indicating that the space is occupiable. click Training Files. you assign spaces to zones in the building. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Zoning is highlighted.5 In the System Browser. the Edit Zone tab displays. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. and a new zone is created. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Computer Lab 222. As you do this. Next. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Reference. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and click OK. you can add or remove a space from the zone. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. The graphic in the System Browser updates. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog.

select HVAC Zones. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). 5 With the drawing area active.In the System Browser. Instruction. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . Expand HVAC Zones. you need to activate the zone visibility. type VG. Click OK. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. To view the zone in the drawing area.

Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. and verify the zone in the System Browser.West . 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. In this exercise. for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. To display space reference lines.TIP After you finish editing the zone. indicating that it’s the active view. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. under Identity Data. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. You activated zone visibility in the views. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.Zoning is highlighted. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. and click OK. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.Zoning.West . 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 In the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. under Spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 11 Close the System Browser. enter 2 . click Finish Editing Zone. click Reference. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. click Training Files. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. expand 2 .Area B. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.

15 Press Esc. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning view. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. click in the Level 2 . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.5 Click in the Level 1 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2". Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 8 In the Level 1 . 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning view to activate it. Select Attached End. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. zoom out.Zoning view.Zoning floor plan.

You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. click Training Files.East.Zoning to make it the active view. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. Front. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. you verify the building. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. enter Lounge . and zone information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Name Value. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. click the corner where the Top. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. double-click Level 1 .rvt. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .Zoning view. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. space. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. on the ViewCube. double-click the zone tag. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.

Click (Highlight). you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . With 109 Lounge selected. Next. click (Isolate). and select 109 Lounge. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. you isolate the space. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Using the Highlight tool. verify that Wireframe is selected. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge.

select 109 Lounge. ■ ■ ■ Next.■ On the Details tab. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. click . For Construction Type. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. and click OK. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. select 1_South_Lounge. and in the People dialog. click . verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. verify that <Building> is selected. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. the space information displays for the selected space. and then click OK. For Electrical Loads. and then click OK. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). Below the list of spaces and zones. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. scroll down in the left pane. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. click . and in the Electrical Loads dialog. select Lounge/Recreation. For People. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. Next.

This indicates the cooling set point. cooling air temperature. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and humidification set point. verify that <Building> is selected. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . outdoor air per area.00 °F : 90. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. floors. For Heating Information. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids.00 °F : N/A is specified. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. roofs. verify that 70. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. verify that 74. and air changes per hour.00 °F : 54. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. Below the list of spaces and zones. 12 Using the methods learned previously. and other room-bounding components. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. click (Shading). heating air temperature. Next. This indicates the heating set point. the zone information displays for the selected zone. This indicates the outdoor air per person.00 °F : N/A is specified. For Cooling Information. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. and dehumidification set point.

select Plenum. select Level 3. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 15 In the Project Browser. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. enter 212P. select Plenum. open MEP . 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. For Offset. enter 0.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Under Energy Analysis. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click OK. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Because this is an unoccupied space. For Name.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Under Energy Analysis. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. for Number. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. click Cancel. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space.

Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. double-click Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Postal Code. On the Place tab. and zone information. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. is selected.rvt. verify that Manchester. For Location.Space Plan. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Energy Analysis. click Edit. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. NH. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. space. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select School or University. for Energy Data.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . for City. click in the Value field. enter 03101. and verify that the space has replaced the void. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. and select space Plenum 212P. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. click Training Files. In this exercise. you verified building.

and enter 50 sq. select Library . click Edit. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. In order to select a space. select space Library 219. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Values. click in the Value column. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. you need to select this option. For Condition Type. Click OK twice. select Specified. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. both. a cooling load. right-click. verify that Occupiable is selected. and click Element Properties. under Volume Computations. for Values.Audio Visual. Under Heat Gain (per Person). this option adjusts the times automatically. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. select Specified. and click OK. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and then click . select Heated and cooled. ft. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. If. ■ On the Weather tab. verify that <Building> is specified. For Sensible. For Export Complexity. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. verify that Level 1 is selected. verify that 1' 0" is specified. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. enter 150 Btu/h. For Ground Plane. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. For Project Phase. verify that New Construction is selected. and click OK. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. For Latent. and click OK. Select Area per person. For Space Type. 8 In the drawing area.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. For Sliver Space Tolerance. or neither. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. For People. enter 200 Btu/h. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. for Building Service. For Building Construction. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting).

There should be no warnings displayed. is specified. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. select 219 Library. For Electrical Loads. For Building Service. Select the space associated with the warning. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that Manchester. click Information). Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . Revit MEP stores this information as project information. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select Actual. Click OK twice. for Values. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. and click OK. 12 Click the Details tab. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. and under Heating Information. You should correct the space error in the building model. and can be modified here. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Under Power. for Values. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. For Location. NH. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. verify that School or University is selected. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . click Edit.■ ■ ■ Click OK. select Actual. For Building Construction. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. You have verified the building information. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). click Calculate. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Next. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that <Building> is specified. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays.

verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. space. and zone information for the building model. 16 After you review the loads report. 15 Review the loads report for project. 3 In the drawing area. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 21 Click OK. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . click Training Files. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 In the loads report. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Color Scheme. under Energy Analysis. In this exercise.Space Plan. click to the right of the building to place the legend. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 19 In the drawing area. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. indicating that it’s the active view. or zone information. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes.rvt. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. and a loads report displays. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. select 219 Library. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. Click OK. weather. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. space.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. or make any changes to the model. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. select HVAC Zones. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog.

7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. select the color scheme legend. under Schemes. select Tonnage Range. in 1-ton increments. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. The new scheme displays in the view. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.5 Zoom in to the legend.

74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 11 Using the method learned previously. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.

enter Space Airflow Schedule.12 Close the file with or without saving it. for Select available fields from. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . click Training Files. In the next exercise. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog.Space Fill is the active view. For Phase. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Select Schedule building components.rvt. select Spaces. For Name. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. select New Construction. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. more category options are available. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this exercise. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. select Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. If you select Show categories from all disciplines.

Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter . In the Fields dialog. for Formula.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. and then click Conditional Format. For Type. Click OK. enter Airflow Delta. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. For Discipline. Select Ascending. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. and then select Hidden field. select Number. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and Blank line. select Calculated Supply Airflow. and then click . select Not Between.■ Under Available fields. and click OK. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. In the Calculated Value dialog. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. select Level. For Fields. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. Select Formula. Header. select Level. For Then by. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select HVAC. select Air Flow. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Airflow Delta. For Formula. In the Schedule Properties dialog. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. click (Browse). ■ Click Calculated Value.

and click OK. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. verify that Show is highlighted. click the color swatch. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. select red. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. right-click to access schedule properties. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In this exercise. For Background Color. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. a view opens that contains the selected space. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. In later exercises.■ ■ ■ For Value. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. In the Color dialog. ■ The schedule displays. In the next lesson. Click OK twice. Under Conditions to Use. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 .

78 .

learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. After completing the air systems lesson. Then. you modify air terminal parameters. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). and work with the airflow schedule. As you place the air terminals. 79 . you will create supply air systems. In this lesson. After system creation. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you size ductwork and validate your air system design.

3 In the ceiling view. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. click Training Files. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. the space crossing lines display.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and scroll to space 223. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i.

and press Enter. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. Also. and then select both Copy and Multiple. select the diffuser. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. The schedule updates with the new flow data.Rectangular Face Round Neck . 9 On the Placement panel. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 15 On the Options Bar. If the host element is modified or moved. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. click Place on Face. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. as shown.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . the hosted elements are updated as well. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. for Flow. verify that Constrain is cleared. 13 On the Options Bar. and select Supply Diffuser .Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. type 12. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. enter 425 CFM. and press Enter. which in this case is the ceiling grid. and then press Esc to end the command. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 17 Move the cursor down.

click Yes. 29 Place 2 diffusers.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click Place on Face. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. 28 On the Placement tab. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. select one of the diffusers. clear Leader. and click Open. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. Next. 22 In the drawing area.rfa. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar. 27 Select Return Diffuser . 24 In the Open dialog. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. as shown. and then press Esc. 25 In the drawing area. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. As you place the return diffusers.

under Other. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. Level. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 32 In the Project Browser. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. for Reference. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. select one of the return diffusers. and click to select the lines. as shown. select Strong Reference. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 31 In the alert dialog. click Yes.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. 44 Zoom in to space 115. click the Level 1 line. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK. ■ ■ For the end point.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. For the start point. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . enter 9' 0"2750. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. for Constraints ➤ Offset. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed.Design is highlighted. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. the space crossing lines display.rvt. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. click Training Files.Press Esc. including energy analysis. right-click the title. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. and click View ➤ Systems. In this exercise. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. When you highlight a space. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You then create the logical connection between the system components. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. After creating the logical connection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. However. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan .

the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 15 Click Cancel. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. and Flow value. As you add diffusers to systems. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. On the Options Bar. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Connect Into. System Name. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 12 In the System Browser. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 6 Keep the System Browser open. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 11 In the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. the number of elements is updated. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. review the Number of Elements.

you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. Rename the system Next. under Identity Data. 25 Click OK.17 Using the method learned previously. In this exercise. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. for Mark. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). for System Name. and the system connects them. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. In this exercise. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. which updates the name in the System Browser. 22 Click OK. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. under Mechanical. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. the air terminals are the children. 26 Click Finish Editing System. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 18 Click OK.

When you highlight a space using the cursor.rvt. In this case. select the upper left diffuser. and display solution 1. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. which provides various layout tools. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. A Generate Layout tab displays. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . 4 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan. select Network. indicating that it’s the active view. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . for Solution Type. the space crossing lines display. the Network type provides several solutions. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Also. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions.Design is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser.

96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . For Duct Type. enter 9' 10 1/2". 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. Select Branch. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. Click OK. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Duct Type. click Modify. For Flex Duct Type. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. click Settings. enter 3'. For Offset. For Offset.7 On the Options Bar. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. you’ll get an error in a later step. enter 9' 10 1/2". If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.Round. as shown. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures.

NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Either relocate the system components. as is the elbow itself. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . or offset elevations are incorrect. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. For example.11 Click Finish Layout. or manually modify the duct. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. select a different layout solution.

you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. and equipment. a disconnection exists. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. thus it is not part of the system. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Using a flow-based color scheme. select By View. If the entire network does not highlight. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for Values Displayed. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. fittings. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. and click OK.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. select Duct Color Fill . for Color Scheme. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. The first time you press Tab. and then click OK. Usually. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights.Flow. and click to select it. highlight a segment of the main duct. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. but not all values are used in this view. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. under Graphics. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect.

Velocity.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. select the color scheme legend. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog.Airflow. select the WSHP. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Duct Color Fill . 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). and then press Esc to clear the selection. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and press Enter. select one of the diffusers in the system. 26 Click OK. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. for Schemes. and click OK. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical . 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. 20 In the drawing area. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. for Flow.

and then click to select it. click Cancel. Select Restrict Height. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. The ductwork and fittings are updated. select Friction. and drag it to the right. Select the upper segment of main duct. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and select 16". you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. for Branch Sizing.08 in-wg/100ft. highlight a segment of the duct. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Under Constraints. and enter . select Calculated Size Only. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Click OK.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Select Only. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . static pressure. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 33 Move the cursor over the system components. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Using this tool. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. pressure. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). and pressure loss. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Use the information that displays (flow. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system.

also known as the critical path. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Training Files. 35 Click Finish. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.NOTE As you inspect a system.

Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and select the WSHP. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and click Draw Duct.HVAC Plan . and click to specify the end of the main duct. indicating that it’s the active view.

14 In the Project Browser. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 11 On the Options Bar. NOTE When drawing duct.3D MEP. select 9' 10 1/2". 15 On the ViewCube. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. for Offset. Front. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. select the top right diffuser. click the corner where the Top. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. double-click MEP . and click Draw Duct.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . right-click the connector grip.

select the top unconnected supply diffuser. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 22 Using the same method. The ductwork is automatically created. the color fill indicates the flow value.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 19 In the drawing area. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . in space 115. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. Also. it is considered a closed loop. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct).

24 Select the remaining diffusers. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. You can ignore the warning. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser.

29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. and then click Modify. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. and click to select it. 30 Press Esc twice. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split).To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations.

and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Airflow. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. for Flow. such as a plenum. clear Restrict Height. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. under Constraints. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. and click OK. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. select a segment of the main duct. and then click OK. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Using the same method.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. under Mechanical . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Then. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. and a cooling tower located on the roof. 109 . additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. In this lesson.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. including 2 base mounted pumps. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Create return and supply piping systems. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.rvt. you place mechanical equipment. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . on level 3 of the building model. click Training Files.

indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. in corridor 328. as shown.Left Return .High Efficiency .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . verify that Wall faces is selected.HVAC Plan . and select WSHP . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .2-6 Tons .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Horizontal . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 7 On the Options Bar.

13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. as shown. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. and in the Type Selector. and enter 2'. 10 Select the WSHP. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click to place the dimension.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .8 Click the corridor wall face. verify that the WSHP is still selected. click the dimension. as shown. click the top edge of the WSHP.

and click to place it in the mechanical room. for Water Flow. Click OK. select the 2 WSHPs. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown. enter 12 GPM. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Under Mechanical. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 .14 Click Modify. enter 9'. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset.

114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create the logical connection between the system components.21 Click Modify. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the return and supply piping systems. including flow and pressure.

and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. and click View ➤ Piping.Design is highlighted. click Training Files. You can create pipes to connect system components.rvt. right-click the Systems column heading. Unlike logical connections (systems). 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . where it is easier to review the information. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . but without a corresponding system.Mech 330). Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Creating a Piping System | 115 . analyses cannot be performed.HVAC Plan . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 5 In the System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.

A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. while pressing Ctrl. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. for System Name. As you assign equipment to systems. Assigning a system component to an existing system. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. This display indicates that the system is selected. 12 In the drawing area. Therefore. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select the 2 WSHPs. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and the Edit System tool is not active. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Notice that on the Options Bar. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned.In the System Browser. select the boiler. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 10 On the Options Bar. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations.

and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. for System Name.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 19 In the Project Browser. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. under Design ➤ HVAC . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.13 Click Finish Editing System. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.Design. double-click Roof . 17 On the Options Bar. and select the cooling tower.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. You have created the hydronic return system. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.

the boiler supplies heated water to the system. expand the Hydronic Return system category. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. and bypasses the cooling tower. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and click OK. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 28 Using the same method. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. indicating the logical connection. 23 Close the roof plan view. and click Expand All.22 In the Select Connector dialog. 25 Select the boiler. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. In cooling mode. and click Select. 29 Right-click CHWS. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). In heating mode.

and click OK. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. You also manually modify the layout path as required. for Water Flow. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. expand Piping. you can view several parameters. including the flow rate and size of the component. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog.In the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. and click OK. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 32 In the System Browser. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Properties. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. under Mechanical. and click Column Settings. enter 18 GPM.

When you draw a box to select components. 5 In the Filter dialog. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 10 Click OK. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Training Files. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. and click OK. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 9 In the Select a System dialog. click Check None. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click to select it. you can place the cursor over a system component. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. select CHWR. then the Select a System dialog displays. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green.HVAC Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. press Tab to highlight the system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps.Mech 330). select Mechanical Equipment. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. indicating that it’s the active view. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). the boiler. A system preview displays in red.

This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that Solutions is selected. structural beams. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. duct. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. enter 1' 6''. It does not reference the architecture. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. click Settings. 13 Click Cancel. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. For Inset.11 On the Options Bar. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. or architectural components. select Perimeter. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected.

With each Tab. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 17 Optionally.16 Click Finish Layout. and the flow for the other is 12. to display the path with thinner lines. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. and press Tab 3 times. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. 19 In the drawing area. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the flow for one WSHP is 18. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects.

22 Select the boiler. 23 Under Mechanical. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). and click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Press Esc. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and click OK. and access its instance properties.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. under Mechanical. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 .

which propagates flow throughout the system. Logically.HVAC Plan . you physically close the CHWR loop. the Number of Elements is now 8. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. 27 On the System Tools panel. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 32 Click Finish Editing System. double-click Level 1 . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. On the Options Bar. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 28 In the Project Browser.Design. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Edit System. Next.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

under Mechanical. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. and click Cancel. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. select a WSHP. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. 38 Using the same method. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. as shown. 35 Using the drag control. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. access its instance properties.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below.

select Perimeter 1 of 5. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . For Inset.40 In the Select a System dialog. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. Click Settings. select CHWS. 41 Click OK. enter 1' 6''. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. enter 0''/12''. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and then click OK. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. For Slope.

In a later exercise. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 48 While pressing Ctrl.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. (Both sections are at the same elevation. 47 In the drawing area. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . as shown.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 46 Click Modify.

or offset elevations are incorrect. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Either relocate the system components. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Add piping to close the supply loop. 51 Click Finish Layout. or manually modify the pipe. select a different layout solution. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.50 Using the same method. To create the piping system. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 52 Close the file with or without saving it. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe).

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. indicating that it’s the active view. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.Design is highlighted. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. click Training Files. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown. As you work in the training file. and the return pipes are magenta. double-click 3D HVAC Building. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.

7 In the plan view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. as shown. 6 Press Delete. select the section of piping. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.

■ Move the cursor up 4''. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Click to move the piping. Click to specify the reference point. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 9 In the 3D view. select the boiler.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and press Esc to clear the selection.

The connections are automatically created. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 12 In the 3D view. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK. select the boiler. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. and the lower one is secondary. and click Draw Pipe. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. select the return pipe riser. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 13 In the plan view.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system.

15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. and press Enter. ■ Move the cursor down. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 .7''. and you select 1 connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. enter 1' . the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.In a plan view. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. enter 2'.

134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the primary base mounted pump. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 18 Press Esc twice. and select it. As you place piping runs that are close together. and the appropriate fittings are created. as shown. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. and click OK. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 19 In the plan view.

and click the minus symbol. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click to draw the pipe. you select the tee fitting. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 28 Press Esc. 27 Move the cursor to the right. 29 If necessary. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click Draw Pipe. click to connect to the pump. right-click the bottom connector. and when the connector point displays. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .

33 Press Esc. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the discharge connector. for Offset. 31 On the Options Bar. enter 4'.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. select the primary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe.

35 Using the method learned previously.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. these pipe connections were created automatically.

■ ■ On the Options Bar. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. enter 9' 6''. type 1'. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and click to create the pipe. for Offset. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and click Draw Pipe. ■ Move the cursor down. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and press Enter.

37 Click Modify. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. right-click. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. and click Element Properties. Next. You now have a closed loop system. you validate the flow through the system.

43 Press Esc. 46 Press Esc. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 42 Click OK. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. select the cooling tower. for Cooling Water Flow. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). The flow is being propagated through the piping. view the properties for the secondary pump. and click Element Properties.50 or 50% of the Flow. under Mechanical. Connect the cooling tower Next. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. the value is 0 GPM. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 44 In the 3D view. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 48 In the plan view. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 41 Using the same method. 40 Click Cancel. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. as shown. notice that under Mechanical. When you create the pumps in parallel. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). under Mechanical. and click OK.39 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.■ Lower pipe (outlet). NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .

When the valve is open. select the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i.rvt. the water bypasses the cooling tower. and is heated by the boiler. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and close the dialog. Adding Valves In this exercise.50 In the 3D View.

HVAC Plan . The bypass valve is closed by default. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and select Ball Valve . verify that the Diameter value is 3''. Adding Valves | 143 . 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.Design is highlighted. 8 Press Esc twice.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 4 On the Options Bar.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. indicating that it’s the active view.

Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 14 Using the same method. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.10 Press Esc. parallel to the previously placed valve. place another Ball Valve .

Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. and select Ball Valve . validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. Adding Valves | 145 . and click OK. verify that Flow is 0 GPM.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). 19 Using the same method. under Mechanical. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. 20 Select the bypass valve. right-click. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. and select Ball Valve .Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. and click Element Properties. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). In heating mode.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.HVAC Plan .rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. as shown. click Training Files. Initially. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 23 Close the file with or without saving it.22 Using the method you just learned.

Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. and click OK. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Pipe Color Fill .Size. Sizing Pipe | 147 . for Schemes. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. select Pipe Color Fill . This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click OK.Flow. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values.

13 Press Esc.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. Select And. Click OK. and enter 2. for Branch Sizing. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). select Friction.25 FT/100ft. enter 5 FPS. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Under Constraints. and click to select the branch. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and for Velocity. select Larger of Connector and Calculated.

The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Inspecting the System In this exercise. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.rvt. click Training Files. Inspecting the System | 149 . you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. pressure. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select a different layout solution. Using the System Inspector. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. or offset elevations are incorrect.Design ➤ 3D Views.

150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as required. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. flow.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). and pressure information including pressure loss. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. This information helps you modify the system design. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. An inspection flag reports the section number. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

67 psi.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1.89 psi.88 psi. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you need to validate them. the Static Pressure is 7. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 Click Finish. for Fluid Temperature. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. inspect Section 6 again. and to size pipe. and the Pressure Loss is 1. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. 9 Using the same method. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. and click OK. select 90° F. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. as shown. targeting those systems that need attention. In this exercise. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.

Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. the pipe is associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. For example. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Warnings display. and click View. 6 In the Project Browser. As you learned when placing components.HVAC Plan . A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. and double-click Level 3 . After you have assigned all components to systems. If you place components without assigning them to a system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected.rvt. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. 7 In the System Browser.Design. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 4 In the System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments.Design. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. and for pipe sizing.HVAC Plan . This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. right-click the Systems titlebar. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. and click Show to view all of the system components. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the System Browser. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. 9 Right-click CHWS. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. double-click Level 1 . thus assigning the components to a system. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . After you assign components to a system. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.

expand the Unassigned folder. 12 In the System Browser.Design floor plan. and select Level 3 . click Close. 14 Using the methods that you learned.HVAC Plan . and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 10 Using the same methods. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. and confirm unassigned system components. and click Expand All. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. right-click Hydronic Return. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. otherwise.TIP If you have multiple views open. 13 Right-click CHWR.

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 155 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

156 .

you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

enter 1.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. As you place components and create circuits. select 75. For Temperature. Select Correction Factor. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. ■ ■ For Factor. select Copper. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Wire Sizes. select 90. expand Wiring . speeding up the design phase. In this exercise you review electrical settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. ■ ■ For Material. Click OK. You also add a wiring type. For Temperature Rating. and demand factors that are applied in the design. enter THHN. ■ Click New Correction Factor. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. wiring. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. distribution systems. select Wiring Types. For Material. select Copper.04. click Training Files.rvt.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ In the Color dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Red. Click Background Color.■ ■ For Value. for Custom Colors. Click OK three times. enter -5 fc and 5 fc.

you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Create a panel schedule. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. First. as you place lighting fixtures. Create power loads. 167 . Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Use the System Browser to check your design. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. power circuits. Then. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels.

for Basic Colors. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 2 In the drawing area. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.00 fc.Lighting Color Fill view is open. select Average Estimated Illumination. select the color for Less Than 20. By using orange as the color for this range. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. for the Spaces Category. You can create additional color schemes. Under Scheme Definition.00 fc.rvt. click Training Files. click (Open). In the Color dialog. Click OK. select the color legend. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. select Orange.

13 Click the Level 2 . expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).7 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.5 fc range. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 8 In the Project Browser. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. The red field will clear once the +/. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) .5 fc range is satisfied. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.277.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . zoom to space Library 219. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 .Lighting Ceiling plan. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.

19 Press ESC to end the command. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 18 Click to place the fixture. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 25 On the Options Bar. the fixtures will move accordingly. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Multiple. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected.

31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. select Multiple.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 30 On the Options Bar. select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 .

Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the value in red for the space Library 219.32 Press ESC. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

select Lighting Fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . click Check None. 36 In the Filter dialog.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .277V. and for Category. Click OK.

The values in the schedule are updated automatically. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.

The lighting delta is satisfied. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .277V.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. click the ceiling grid line as shown. 41 On the Options Bar. 42 In the drawing area. Note the changes for the space Library 219. select Multiple Alignment.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. The fixture aligns.

rvt. In the next exercise. you modify the light fixture IES files. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures.45 Press ESC to end the command. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 .

Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. scroll to view space space Library 219. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting Plan. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.Lighting Color Fill plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 2 Tile the views as shown.

click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. ■ Click Apply. click the value for Light Loss Factor. enter F15.93. Under Photometrics. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. Under Identity Data.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Under Photometrics.277V and click OK. click the value for Initial Intensity. select Luminous Flux. click the value for Initial Color. ■ Click OK twice. Under Photometrics. In the Select File dialog. for Lamp. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. In the Name dialog. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. specify 15000.00 lm. enter . for Color Preset. and click OK.00 VA. for Apparent Load. for Ballast Loss Factor. enter . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. enter 162. select T5 [HO]. ■ Under Photometrics.ies and click Open. select 463T5_S. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Under Electrical. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. for Type Mark. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation.85. select Xenon and click OK.

12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 10 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. and for Category.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.277V. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . select Lighting Fixtures. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown.

Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Note the lighting delta updates again. 15 In space Library 219.Press Delete. select the top center fixture. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.

Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

click (Open). and receptacles to your design. junction boxes. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. click Training Files. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Placing Switches. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. you add switches. In the next exercise. 2 In the drawing area. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 183 .rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 Close the file with or without saving it.Press Delete.

7 Click to place the switch.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.277V. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .

9 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 185 .NoLoad. 12 In the Load Family dialog.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. The element type Junction Boxes . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.rfa and click Open. Placing Switches. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Junction Boxes. Select Junction Boxes .NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.

note the Number of Poles is 1. for Mark.Offset. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open.14 Press ESC to end the command. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. NOTE When entering values. 21 In the drawing area. enter JB-1NL. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 15 Select the junction box. for Level 2 .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. In the Type Properties dialog. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. enter 9’0”. zoom to space Library 219. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. Click OK twice. Click Edit Type. Under Electrical. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.

Expand Electrical. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Placing Switches. Click OK. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. 26 In the System Browser. Expand General. 23 In the System Browser. 24 For any column.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Junction Boxes. Distribution System. and Voltage. Space Number. and Number of Elements. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Select Load. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. NOTE If necessary. and Receptacles | 187 . This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Space Name. right-click and click Column Settings. Select Size.

Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 31 Close the System Browser. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.

Placing Switches. select Copy and Multiple. 38 Select the receptacle. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. and Receptacles | 189 . Junction Boxes.

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and enter 12’ and press ENTER. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. 42 Move the cursor down.

43 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 191 .

47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.

click Training Files. click (Open). zoom to the space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Adding wiring to a project is optional. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created.equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rvt. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. and work toward the higher voltage. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i.

8 Select the panelboard. enter 20. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select 120/208 Wye. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 15 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. enter PP-2B. For Panel Name. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 Select the panelboard. for Max. for Distribution System. Click OK.Loads.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . select 480/277 Wye. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. for Distribution System. #1 Pole Breakers.Surface: 100A.

22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Click OK. click Check None. enter LP-2B. and for Category. zoom to space Instruction 221. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures.Loads. 23 In the Filter dialog. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. For Panel Name. 20 In the drawing area. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. which is the logical connection between the elements. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. Click OK. enter 20. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Max. #1 Pole Breakers.

25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 32 Press ESC. 33 Select the switch on the right. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.

for Hot Conductors. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Wires. Click OK. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Click OK. 41 In the Filter dialog. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and for Category. click (Open). 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 44 Close the file with or without saving it.Loads. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click Check None. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. enter 2. except without wire. 38 Press ESC to end the command.

Rating. click Training Files. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Expand Electrical. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. right-click on the Systems heading. and Voltage Drop are selected. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 2 In the drawing area. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 13 In the System Browser. and verify that Load. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings.rvt. Voltage. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Click OK. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and then expand circuit 1. Distribution System. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Power. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical.

30 Close the System Browser. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 With the junction box still selected. under Electrical. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Click OK. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.

click Edit Type. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 47 In the drawing area. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 40 Click OK twice. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. note the label parameters and click Cancel. Click Tags. enter FR4. click below the first one to place it. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. under Identity Data. for Type Mark. Click Yes. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Click OK.

Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. select Break. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Click OK. 52 In the Save As dialog. click Check None. 56 In the Filter dialog. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. for File Name. Click Save. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. and for Category. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . For Circuit Number. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Click OK. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Next you create a switch system. and click Apply. Deselect Break and for Suffix.rfa. enter a comma. Click OK. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. enter a. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 2 In the drawing area. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. for Switch ID. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. click Training Files.rvt. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. under Electrical Lighting. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Creating a Switch System | 205 .

15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. under Electrical . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. Click OK. for switch ID. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. enter b. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.

26 Close the file with or without saving it. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Creating Power Loads | 207 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. lighting. and data systems. 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. click Training Files. 4 In the Filter dialog. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and for Category. Click OK. Circuits are used for power. click Check None. select the PP-2B panel. click (Open). 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select Electrical Fixtures. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 7 In space Electrical 220.rvt. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

13 Select the wire again. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 2. for Hot Conductors. and in the drawing area. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and in the right pane. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire.Loads. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Click OK. and click Open. select Long Wire Tick Mark. and click Element Properties. under Electrical .8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks.rfa. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select Wiring. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. Click OK. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select Hook Wire Tick Mark.

The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and click to select the circuit. Creating Power Loads | 209 . select the PP-2B panel. as shown. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 22 In space Electrical 220.

add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. in space Instruction 221. 28 In the drawing area. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.26 Press Delete. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click the connector of the first receptacle. as shown. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 29 In space Instruction 221.

Next you balance the loads for your design. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 3 In the Electrical space. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. select panel LP-2B. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . zoom to space Electrical 220.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 2 In the drawing area. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Finally. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. click Open. 31 Close the file with or without saving it.

12 Select panel PP-2B. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 1-#12.3712 VA. 1-#10. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 1-#10. and Phase C . B. Click OK. Scroll down. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.3616 VA). 6 Click OK. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 14 Close the warning dialog. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 1-#12. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. Under Electrical-Loads. click Rebalance Loads. enter 30A.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. Notice that the loads on Phase A. for Rating. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. Phase B 3636 VA. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A .

17 Close the warning dialog. for Rating. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.Loads. Next you create a panel schedule. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i.Loads. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. under Electrical .15 Select panel PP-2B. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . for Rating. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. and click OK.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. click Training Files. enter 30A. and click OK. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Click OK. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. under Electrical . 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. click (Open). enter 25A. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Select PP-2B.

enter 3/32.Panel Schedules. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. Under Body Text. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. under Other. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. expand Sheets (all). 5 In the Project Browser. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. for Font Size. for Font. Under Header Text. select Berlin Sans FB. and open E601 . drag PP-2B onto the sheet. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. for Font Size. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 11 Click OK twice. click Edit. select Bold and Italic.rvt. for Appearance.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. enter 1/8. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Under Header Text. 4 Close the report. click (Open). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Select the schedule.

and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. each with a load of 180VA. Expand Unassigned. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. In the System Browser. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. select space Lounge 212.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. press TAB once. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. Checking Your Design | 215 . In the System Browser.

Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 20 On the Options Bar. under Warnings. 15 In the dialog. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 16 Close the details dialog. zoom to space Electrical 214. for Panel. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 In the drawing area. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. select MDP-1.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

in addition to loading existing families. right-click PVC . In this exercise. type PVC .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. 4 In the Name dialog. 219 . and verify that Level 1 . 2 In the Project Browser. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is open. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. In this lesson. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. click Duplicate. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.Sanitary. Adding a pipe size.Vent. and click Properties. planning is critical to a successful design. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. you create a PVC pipe type.

Sch 40 . The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. under Pipe Types. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 26 Click OK. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . enter 5/8''. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 24 For Inside Diameter. PVC . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. select Branch. 21 In the right pane. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV: Standard. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. click Training Files. For Offset. In the Project Browser.DWV: Standard. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . 27 For the new pipe size.Vent is listed.rfa. 17 In the left pane. and click Main. 13 In the right panel. enter 10°. for Nominal. enter 1/2''.PVC . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 25 For Outside. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Tee Vent . and open Imperial\Families\Trap P .Sch 40 . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.0''. select Tee. Tap. Tee.Sch 40 . and click OK.DWV. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. under Mechanical. Cross. select Sanitary. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type.PVC . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 10 On the Selection panel. enter 27/32''. click Pipe Settings. 18 For System Type.5 In the Type Properties dialog. select None. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 15 For System Type. enter -4' . 6 Click OK. for Material. select Plastic.PVC . select Sanitary. 22 Click New Size.

221 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. add a hot water heater. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. including plumbing fixtures. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Create the hot water system. sanitary piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and hot and cold water piping. vent. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the cold water system.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 urinal. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. as shown. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room.rvt. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is open. NOTE To identify a space name and number. you add 2 toilets. including the men’s room (space Male 107). 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and verify that Level 1 . Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.

select Public . 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. as shown. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 4 On the Element panel.6 gpf.Wall Mounted.1. in the Type Selector. against the left wall. 5 On the Placement panel.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. and 3 sinks.Flush Valve . 1 wall-mounted urinal. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. under Water Closet .

above the first in the standard toilet space. zoom in closer. and press Esc.Wall Hung. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. use the reference line to center the fixture. under Urinal . Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. (Again.7 Click to place another toilet.) 8 Press Esc.

13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). In placing the fixture.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. under Floor Drain . you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain.2'' Drain. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . select 5''x5'' Strainer . 14 Click Modify.Rectangular. click Place on Face. 12 On the Placement panel.

20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed.rvt. and Default Domestic Cold Water. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. and review the components listed under this system. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 16 Click the title bar for the browser.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and a floor drain. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. right-click in the System Browser table heading. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. a urinal. and click View ➤ Piping. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary.

and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. and click OK. 8 In the Filter dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. clear Lines (<Overhead>). 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. 6 In the plan view.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan .

for System Name. enter Sanitary 107. If you deselected the drain. so the Create Sanitary System is available. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. You include the bathroom space number in the name. click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 12 On the Edit System panel. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. 11 On the Options Bar. expand Sanitary.

and click OK. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. at the midpoint of the detail lines. for example.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. select Sanitary 107. a toilet. as shown. The base is placed. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 16 In the Select a System dialog. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. A preview of the piping layout displays. select one of the components in the system.

The default settings are automatically modified. enter -4'-0”. 21 On Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. for Diameter. click Solutions. 26 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. 27 Click Modify. select Branch. for Offset. enter -1' 0''. enter 1/8'' / 12''. and modify it to meet project requirements. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 23 For Offset. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. and click OK. select Main. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. select 4''. select Intersections. and click Settings. enter -1' 0''. 24 In the left pane. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. for Slope.19 On the Options Bar. You accept this suggested solution. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Solution Type. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 31 Click Modify. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown.30 In the 3D view. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . 34 On the Generate Layout panel.33 Using the previous method. click Finish Layout.

Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. When a fitting is reversed. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the fitting and click to reorient it. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. as shown.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. you continue with the work from the last exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. and check the slope control.

6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. select 22''x22'' . as shown. 4 On the Element panel.Plumbing Plan . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. click Training Files. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.Design is open.rvt. and verify that Level 1 . under Lavatory . 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 5 On the Placement panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Public.Rectangular. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . in the Type Selector.

■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. select Multiple. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and press Enter to create a second sink. TIP When entering dimensions. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. 8 Select the sink. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .7 Click Modify. For example. On the Options Bar. enter 2' 4''.

and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 11 In the System Browser. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 15 Click the 3 sinks.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 12 In the drawing area. Press Esc. 16 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. click Add To System. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and press Enter to create the third sink. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel.

under Design ➤ Plumbing . and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.In the System Browser. 22 In the plan view.Design ➤ 3D Views. with the tee fitting selected. double-click 3D Plumbing. and click Draw Pipe. 20 Select the fitting. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. use the ViewCube to orient the view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 19 In the 3D view. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 21 Select the tee. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. as shown.

26 On the Options Bar. press Spacebar.6''. for Offset. and click Apply. and click to draw the pipe. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. When you press the Spacebar. 24 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. for Slope. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. enter 2' . 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 1/8'' / 12''. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. In this example.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option.

and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 29 In the Type Selector.PVC . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 30 In the 3D view. move the cursor over the stub pipe. 31 Click Modify.DWV.Sch 40 . select Standard. under Wye 45 Deg Double . click to place the fitting. 32 Select the double wye fitting. and when the vertical center line displays.

on the Options Bar. and press Enter. for Offset. enter 1'.33 With the fitting selected. and press Enter. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 36 In the section view. enter 6''. 37 Select the fitting. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . double-click the section head to open the section view. In the next steps. and click Draw Pipe. 34 Press Esc. you add pipe segments to the double wye. right-click the right connector. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view.

as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 41 Using the same method. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. and click to place the pipe. 40 Click Modify. 42 Click Modify.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.

draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 48 Click Modify. 47 Move the cursor down. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. enter 6''. and click Draw Pipe. and press Esc. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 49 Using the same method. right-click the bottom connector. 46 In the section view. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . press Spacebar.

51 In the Type Selector.PVC . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 55 In the 3D view. 56 Using the same method. under Trap P . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. select Standard. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 52 In the plan view. 54 Click Modify. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.Sch 40 . 53 Using the same method. select the P-Trap on the left. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .

Click in the plan view. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Click Modify. connect the right sink to the double wye. Move the cursor to the left.. and press Enter. Select the double wye pipe on the left.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. enter 6''. In the plan view. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. select the left P-Trap. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. and click Draw Pipe. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 58 Using the same method. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.

while pressing Ctrl. select the section of pipe you just drew. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. as shown. select PVC Sanitary.■ In the 3D view. and select a proposed solution. Press Esc. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. under Pipe Types. while pressing Ctrl. click Finish to select the recommended solution. In the Type Selector. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . On the Routing Solutions panel. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 62 On the Options Bar. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. for Slope. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. You have appropriately sloped the pipe.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. and verify the slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files.rvt. adjusting the sanitary stack. click Finish. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 63 On the Slope Editor panel.

right-click the top connector. 5 Select the tee.DWV. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Design. and click Draw Pipe. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 3 In the Section view. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . click Modify. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Design. select the vertical stack.Floor level line. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and click to draw the pipe. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 7 On the Selection panel. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 10 In the 3D view. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.PVC . 9 In the Type Selector.Sch 40 .Plumbing Plan .Overall. as shown.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. select the elbow fitting on the right. select Standard.

15 Press Esc. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. select Standard.11 Click Modify. as shown. 14 On the Options Bar. under Plug . 18 In the plan view. 12 Select the fitting. for Offset. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 17 In the Type Selector.PVC .Sch 40 .DWV. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 13 Click the rotate control once. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 1'-0”.

Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.Design is open.rvt. click Training Files. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.Plumbing Plan . Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.19 Click Modify. and verify that Level 1 . you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. 20 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. For Offset. for System Type. For Offset. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select Branch. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed.Overall. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and sinks. and for System Type. select Main. click Check None. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Filter dialog. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select Domestic Cold Water. urinal. if necessary. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. and click OK. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click Main. expand Unassigned. select Plumbing Fixtures. minimize the Sanitary system. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.Design ➤ 3D Views. 7 In the left pane. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. select Pipe Types: Water. 4 In the right pane. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. under Design ➤ Plumbing . select Branch. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. 15 In the plan view. select Domestic Hot Water. 9 In the left pane. 14 In the System Browser. select Domestic Hot Water. double-click 3D Plumbing . 6 In the left pane. enter 9' 3''. draw a selection box to select the toilets.) 10 Click OK.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. verify that the value is 9' 0''. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Pipe Types: Water. for System Type.

enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. click Finish Editing System. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . 21 On the Edit System panel. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. In the System Browser. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. Notice that the water main displays in blue. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. 19 On the System Tools panel.

select the sink above the urinal. and click to place the pipe. select Water. right-click the top DCW connector. and click Draw Pipe. 34 In the plan view. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 33 Click Modify. as shown. and press Enter. and click the connector. select 3/4''. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. enter 0”/12”. 35 In the Type Selector. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. connect the second toilet. as shown. click to the left of the urinal. 30 In the plan view. enter 4'0”. at the intersection of the water main pipe. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe.25 Using the same method. For Offset. 32 Move the cursor to the right.2 7/8''. enter 10'. 28 In the Type Selector. enter 3' . 31 On the Options Bar. 36 Move the cursor to the left. under Pipe Types. enter 7''. For Slope. for Offset. 37 On the Options Bar. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. and press Enter. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter.

and click to connect to the main cold water line. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. 40 Click Modify. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click OK.39 Move the cursor to the left. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 41 Select the top sink.

and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. add a water heater. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. you create the hot water system. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .44 Using the same method.

click Training Files.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . 5 In the System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Plumbing Plan . 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. while pressing Ctrl. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the plan view. select the 3 sinks. expand the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Overall. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

In later steps. Default Domestic Cold Water.6 Gallon. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 13 In the plan view. verify that DCW 107 is selected. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. When designing systems. for System Name. Default Domestic Hot Water. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). and click OK. select 0. as shown. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. under Water Heater . 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter Domestic Hot Water 107. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. 15 In the System Browser.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room.Tankless.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. in the Unassigned folder. you edit the system to add equipment. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 12 In the Type Selector. 10 In the System Browser. 14 Click Modify. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click Edit System. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . and press Enter. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. and click the water main line.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Offset: 4' 6''. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. as shown. 22 In the Type Selector. 19 Select the water heater. select the water heater. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 27 Click Modify. and select Draw Pipe. 24 Move the cursor up. for Offset. enter 10’. right-click the middle left connector. and on the Edit System panel. enter 1' 6''. 25 On the Options Bar. click Finish Editing System. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 23 On the Options Bar. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. Slope: 0''/12''.

33 On the Edit System panel. click Edit System. enter 1''. 35 On the Options Bar. and on the Placement Tools panel. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Automatically Connect to switch it off. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. 38 Move the cursor to the right. and press Enter. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. as shown. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and in the System Selector. for Offset. 37 On the Options Bar. select 4'-6''. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 36 Move the cursor down. 30 On the System Tools panel. click Finish Editing System. for Diameter. and for Offset. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. and click Draw Pipe. select Domestic Hot Water 107. enter 9' 0''. enter 1' 6''. select a sink.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view.

40 On the Options Bar. enter 1’. and click just above the bottom sink. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . for Offset. as shown. 41 Move the cursor down. and press Enter. 42 Click Modify. enter 2' 8''.39 Move the cursor down.

45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.43 In the 3D view.

47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.46 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and click Duplicate. go to http://www. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In this lesson.rvt.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. click Training Files. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. 2 Right-click Standard. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can choose to save your work. However. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. You create a new pipe type. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 267 . In this tutorial. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. After finishing each exercise. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. If the tutorial training files are not present. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type.

For Pipe Type. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. However. verify that 9' 0" is selected. structural beams. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. 6 In the Project Browser. For System Type. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. you modify the type properties of the pipe. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. or architectural components. select Fire Protection Wet. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. under Mechanical. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. In the left pane. In this exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. Next.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). For System Type. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. verify that 9' 0" is specified. select Main. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. click Rename. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. For Pipe Type. select Carbon Steel. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Material. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. For Offset. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. you create project parameters and work with schedules. and click Properties. and then click OK. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. duct. In the next exercise. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. and enter Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. select Fire Protection Wet. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 9 Click OK.

When you highlight a space using the cursor. select Fire Protection. select the upper half of the building. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . indicating that it’s the active view. 6 In the drawing area.Fire Protection Plan .rvt. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. click Training Files. select space Instruction 221 as shown. 5 Click OK twice. For Group parameter under.Design is highlighted. the space crossing lines display. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 8 Using a crossing window. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Add.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Name. and click Element Properties. enter Sprinkler Zone.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click. select Spaces. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . enter Zone 1. under Fire Protection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. and then click OK. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. for Sprinkler Zone. Under Categories.

10 In the Filter dialog. select Zone 1. for Sprinkler Zone. under Fire Protection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. for Sprinkler Zone. and then access instance properties. and then click OK. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. to which you add various parameters. under Fire Protection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that only Spaces are selected. you create schedules for sprinkler design. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 13 Using the same method. and then click OK. click Training Files.rvt. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter Zone 2. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and click OK.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. including a calculated value parameter.

enter Light. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Maximum Spacing. Obstructed-Combustible. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. and on the ribbon. click the Formatting tab.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.Design is highlighted. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select To the nearest 1'.Fire Protection Plan . enter Protection Area Construction Type. enter 15. 14 Select the new header. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. For Units. and click Field Format. 7 Click OK. 6 Using the same method. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . select Spaces. 9 On the Formatting tab. Select Schedule keys. for Name. For Key name. Click OK. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 10 In the Format dialog. click Add Parameter. indicating that it’s the active view. select Length. For Type of Parameter. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. For Rounding. The schedule displays. select Fire Protection. For Name.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. For Group parameter under. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. double-click on each column separator. select Maximum Spacing. select Feet and fractional inches. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 11 Click OK twice. Click OK. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the Maximum Spacing column. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule.

■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. enter Sprinkler Schedule. For Name. enter 130. Unobstructed Extra. Click OK. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. under Available fields. and press Enter. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. select Spaces. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light.

22 Click OK twice. select Common.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. 20 On the Formatting tab. Select Header and Blank line. For Units. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). and click Field Format. Click OK. For Type. For Then by. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . select Minimum Sprinklers. for Sorting/Grouping. For Rounding. select Fixed. In the Fields dialog. and click OK. select 0 decimal place. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. For Formula. select Area. and click View Properties. under Other. Enter the formula operator / after Area. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. click Edit. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. select Sprinkler Zone. select Level. 19 Click the Formatting tab. for Sort by. click . Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Discipline. enter Minimum Sprinklers. select Number. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area.

right-click the schedule. ■ In the Format dialog. select Level. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Minimum Sprinklers. and then click Field Format. For Fields. 26 Click OK 3 times. 30 Click OK twice. click Edit. for Filter. verify that Use default settings is selected. 27 In the drawing area. Under Field formatting. for Filter by. and then select Hidden field. select Hidden field. At the bottom of the dialog. select Number. select Sprinkler Zone. select Level equals Level 2. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. For Then by (second instance). For Fields. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and select Totals only. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Grand totals.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. and click View Properties. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields.

under Other. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. for Available fields. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit. For Category.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. for Embedded Schedule. double-click Type. Under Field formatting. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. for Fields. delete the word Maximum. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . System Name. select Sprinklers. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. and select Totals only. On the Formatting tab. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. and click View Properties. and Count. select Calculate totals. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Grand totals. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. select Embedded Schedule. select Count.

Unobstructed. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. select Ordinary. select Light. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and access the instance properties. under Identity Data.Fire Protection Plan Design. but their values are not determined. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. As a result. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select space 221 Instruction. for Protection Area Construction Type. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. Unobstructed. select space 221 Instruction. Unobstructed. and click OK. 44 In the schedule. 43 Click Cancel. select Ordinary. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 48 In the floor plan. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 46 With the space still selected. under Identity Data. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. for Protection Area Construction Type. and the spacing parameter values are evident. 41 In the plan view. double-click FP .Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 50 Access the instance properties. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 52 Click OK. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you can choose to save your work. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After finishing each exercise.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. As you place the sprinklers. As you create the system. click Training Files. you will understand the process. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. If the tutorial training files are not present. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. go to http://www. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. and double-click Level 2 . Adding Sprinklers In this exercise.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. However. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. At the end of this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. 279 . By following the recommended workflow.autodesk. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. methodology. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.

280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . When there is a small misalignment. After placing the initial sprinkler. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. When this happens.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers.

Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and select Sprinkler . 9 In space Instruction 202. select the sprinklers that you placed. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204.Pendent . and click to place 3 sprinklers. as shown. while pressing Ctrl. 11 In the drawing area. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. 10 Press Esc twice. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. Adding Sprinklers | 281 .

and then press Esc. Next. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. verify that Constrain is cleared. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 13 On the Options Bar. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Also. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. as shown. and that Copy and Multiple are selected.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

18 Type WT. enter 11. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 29 Press Esc. 17 In the Project Browser. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Next. specify a vertical offset. and click Element Properties. enter 14' 6". by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. move the cursor to the right. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. and 200C).FP_Ceiling view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. you adjust the offset. under Constraints. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. open Design ➤ FP .Fire Protection Plan . click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. enter 10' 6". Because the sprinkler is not hosted.Design. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. and press Enter. 25 Click OK. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. you place non-hosted sprinklers.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 19 In the floor plan. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. For Number. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . Notice that the schedule updates. This number is determined in the schedule. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. for Offset. 200B. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected.

In the next exercise. After creating the logical connection. indicating that it’s the active view.30 Close the file with or without saving it. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.Fire Protection Plan . This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Unlike logical connections (systems). and with piping (physical connection). However. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). click Training Files. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. and then creating the logical connection between these system components.Design is highlighted. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping.

The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. click View ➤ Systems. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. named Fire Protection Wet. As you assign sprinklers to systems. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Creating a Piping System | 285 . as shown. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. within the Piping Systems folder. In the System Browser. and select Piping. 5 Right-click the header.

Next. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. select Branch. select an initial piping layout. for System Name. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. The Edit Piping System panel displays. 15 In the drawing area. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and click Select. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. For Offset. system equipment. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. 13 In the System Browser. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. click Settings. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. verify that Main is selected. verify that 9' 0" is specified. 12 On the Options Bar. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. and on the Options Bar. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. 14 Click Finish Editing System. and a piping layout preview displays. For Pipe Type. press Tab. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. place the cursor over a sprinkler. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection .Wet is selected. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. The Generate Layout tools are activated. indicating the logical connection. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 11 With the system still selected. 19 Click OK. providing system editing tools. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. In the left pane. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. and number of elements in the system. and select the system.

The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. click Solutions. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . for Diameter. click Place Base. When the layout is finished. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. In general. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and select solution 5. verify that Network is selected. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. as shown. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. enter -12' 0". 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. 23 For Offset. and green represents branch lines).20 On the Generate Layout panel. select 2". 22 On the Options Bar.

29 Click Finish Layout. On the Generate Layout panel.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . A (parallel movement control) displays. click Modify. as shown. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.

Either relocate the system components. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. and then you create piping to physically connect them. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . 32 If necessary. or manually modify the pipe. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. Next.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. select a different layout solution. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. and various manual pipe creation tools. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. the Connect Into tool. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. or that offset elevations are incorrect.

2 Zoom in. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and select the elbow fitting as shown. 3 If necessary. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files.Fire Protection Plan .Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

11 On the Generate Layout panel. and select solution 5. 5 In the drawing area. you can select the pipe or duct. verify that Solutions is selected. and so on) are logically connected by a system. click Finish Editing System. mechanical equipment. 14 Close the System Browser. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. air terminals. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 13 Click Finish Layout. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 9 On the Edit System panel. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. for Solution Type. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 12 On the Options Bar. radiators. click Add To System. verify that Network is selected. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and pipe or duct is created. 8 In the corridor. or a system component to display system tools. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 18 Click Finish Editing System. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers).

Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. for Offset. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 Select the sprinkler. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 21 In the Piping Plan. 29 Using the same method. 24 In the Piping Plan. and then tile the views. select 9'. 27 On the Options Bar. right-click. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 28 In the drawing area.20 Open Design ➤ FP . and click Draw Pipe. and then press Esc.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 23 View the result in the 3D view. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe.

Because the whole system highlights. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 31 In the plan view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.

5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 4 On the Options Bar. double-click on the section head to open the section view.Design is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. ■ 6 Press Esc. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i.rvt. select 1/4" = 1'-0". Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Fire Protection Plan . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. for Scale.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .21 On the Options Bar. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. for Diameter. select 4".

22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select 1 1/4". Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 25 On the Options Bar. The pipe diameter is modified. for Diameter. 23 Close the 3D view. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. as shown. 24 In the drawing area. and then tag the piping as shown. 26 Using the same method. and maximize the floor plan. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 .

27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. In this exercise. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. In this tutorial. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. You added tags to pipes. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. you created a wet fire protection system. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. For additional practice.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. add annotations and dimensions. 305 . create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.

306 .

and click Properties. click Training Files.rvt. right-click Copy of Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. 307 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Level 1. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. matchlines. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. dependent views. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. If the view included detail graphics. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and apply a view template. and view references. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. under Floor Plans.

as shown. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. click Training Files. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. more focused. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. 9 Click OK. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 10 In the drawing area. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 4 Using the same method. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. and click Apply Default View Template. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. views and put them on the sheet. and then press Esc. create dependent views for areas B and C. and click OK. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C.

select 11. for Target view. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. For Line Weight./ ---). 13 Press Esc twice. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. click the current value.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . select Double Dash 5/8". select black. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 21 Using the same method. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 14 Click Finish Matchline. and click OK. on the Options Bar. Click OK. and then press Esc. In the Color dialog. 19 In the drawing area. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. For Line Pattern. 20 Select the upper view reference and.

The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and zoom to each of the view references.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 27 Using the same method. 25 Using the same method. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. as shown. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . crop the dependent views for plans B and C. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201.

2 Zoom in. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Domestic Water.29 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. For Default View Template. right-click Plumbing Isometric . you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water.rvt. right-click 3D Plumbing. select Plumbing Isometric. click Training Files. The section crop lines no longer display. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for View Classification. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. select Documentation. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing. enter Plumbing Isometric . 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. for View Name. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. For Sub-Discipline. 4 In the Project Browser.Domestic Water. and click Apply Default View Template. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Properties. Click OK. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. and select the section box. and click to select it. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Under Graphics.

Click Apply. 12 Using the same method. select 3. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. For Pattern. select Dash. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight.9 Right-click. press Tab 3 times. and then click OK. and click to select it. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". The selected piping displays as a dashed line.

press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. and click to select it. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. as shown). 14 Right-click. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .

click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. press Tab 3 times. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. Right-click. In the drawing area. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. 17 Label the fixtures as shown.15 Press Esc. 18 Using methods learned previously. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . Click in the drawing area to start a text label. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. and click to select it.Domestic Water view with detailing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . click Reveal Hidden Elements. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping.Sanitary Waste. On the View Control Bar. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. On the View Control Bar. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.

as shown. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. select To the nearest 1/8". click on the Format value. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 25 Press Esc twice. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. for Rounding. When the view is associated with a sheet. 21 Click OK twice. verify that Common is selected. and click to place the spot slope annotation. For Slope. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. In the Format dialog. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. you use a plan view to create a callout view.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Creating Callout Views | 315 .

6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan).rvt. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. for Scale. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary.

for Line Weight.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. Creating Callout Views | 317 . and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. select 5. 13 In the Project Browser. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. using the same method. drag it to the sheet. double-click M601 . 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Click OK. under Sheets (all).

for View Name. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Default View Template. and select the viewport. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply Default View Template. right-click the callout view.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. enter WSHP PART PLAN. For Title on Sheet. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. Click OK. 17 In the Project Browser.

The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. Creating Callout Views | 319 .Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.

and click OK. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and click Rename. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and click OK. and click Apply View Template. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 25 In the Project Browser. right-click the detail view.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. under Names. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. enter Typical WSHP Detail.

symbols. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. 321 . and annotation to create a legend.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. linetypes. ■ work with model-based components. duct tags. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.

3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.rvt. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. 8 With the text still selected. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. click Training Files. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and then click Right Straight. as shown. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. a segment of round duct.9 Press Esc twice. verify that Leader is cleared. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 In the drawing area. a return diffuser. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. and a segment of rectangular duct. select a supply diffuser. Creating Annotations | 323 . Add leaders 10 Select the text box.

tag the remaining diffusers in the area.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. 22 In the Tags dialog. clear Leader. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. click Load. under Category.rfa. you can annotate the element with a second tag type.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 24 On the Options Bar. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 20 In the Tags dialog. 17 Click Modify. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. If necessary. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. and click OK. for Ducts. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 21 In the Load Family dialog. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. and click Open.

Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Options Bar. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 32 In the drawing area. and Attached End. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. Creating Annotations | 325 . select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Leader. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A.25 In the drawing area. select Horizontal. 31 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. as shown.

click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. as shown.33 On the Options Bar. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area. select Free End. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Leader.

and all elements of that type are affected. lay out. for Leader Arrowhead. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. select the last tag placed. That’s because you changed a type property. and lock lighting fixtures. select Dot Open 1/16". 37 In the drawing area.36 Press Esc twice. Creating Dimensions | 327 . not simply an instance property. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 40 Using the method learned previously. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. and click OK. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. you use temporary dimensions to locate.

drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. and then select the interior face of the wall. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. On the Options Bar. 12 Press Esc.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select the dimension line. indicating that it’s the active view. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted.

Because the dimensions are locked. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. and offset them 8' from the wall. linework.3 1/2"). 16 Press Esc. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. Creating a Legend In this exercise. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. enter 8'. and press Enter.13 Using the same method. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click the 3 interior locks on the line. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . 19 Using the same methods. annotation symbols. Creating a Legend | 329 . and notes. 20 Close the file with or without saving it.

6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . Click OK. select Floor Plan.8 Neck. 10 Using the same method.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. enter Diffuser Legend. select 1/4" = 1' -0". 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 5 Click in the drawing area. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. For View. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . For Scale. click below the title to place the diffuser. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .rvt. click Training Files. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.

15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Creating a Legend | 331 . annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. click next to the top diffuser. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 14 In the drawing area.11 Press Esc.

DROP and its text note. and then press Esc. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 21 Press Esc. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. The selected detail lines are now thin. 24 Select the component’s break line. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 26 Press Esc. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 22 Zoom in to the copied component.

32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 333 . Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. enter E.30 Select Spot Elevation . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 35 Change the text on the right to N. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 34 Using the method learned previously. and then click Modify. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then click Modify. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc.39 With the viewport still selected.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram.113 East elevation view. 335 .rvt. detail groups. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A drafting view using detail components. A detail callout that references another view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.Detailing 15 In this lesson. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. and text.

Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. clear Leader.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 5 In the drawing area. 7 Drag the Power Riser . 4 On the Options Bar.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. and then modify and align the views. Next. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. select each of the 2 panelboards. and click to place it. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 8 Using the same method.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view.113 East on the sheet. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . place Power Riser .

enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click OK. giving the appearance of a single view. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 .9 Press Esc. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click Activate View. 13 Right-click. right-click. and click Deactivate View. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. under Identity Data. 12 Select the Level 1 line. for Title on Sheet. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. select the 113 North view. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. In the next exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and click Activate View. as shown. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. right-click. you add wiring to the diagram. select the 113 East elevation view. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 19 Select the Level 1 line. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Press Esc. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 21 Using the drag control.

7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. verify that Chain is selected. for Name. 9 Beginning at the transformer. click Training Files. In the Line Styles dialog. as shown. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. As you draw. Under Modify Subcategories. for Line Weight. expand Lines. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. click New. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. and then click OK.113 North view. 2 Close the Project Browser. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .rvt. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 8 On the Options Bar. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. notice that there are no snaps active. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. In the New Subcategory dialog. enter Electrical Power. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). and click OK. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . select 6.

14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). for Offset. enter 1/8". 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing .10 Press Esc.

you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. so that the result is as shown. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim.

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.

27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 29 Click Modify. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 28 Click above the cap.

32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.31 While pressing Ctrl. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 33 On the Options Bar. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. select Multiple. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.

Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol.36 Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . and press Enter.5. and then press Esc. 39 Move the cursor to the right. You enter exact values for each line length. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 40 Press Esc. for Offset. enter 3/32". 42 On the Options Bar. enter 0 0. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.

and click OK. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter Ground. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 46 In the Project Browser. Press Esc. select all 3 lines. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view.125. 50 With the group selected. click on the length dimension value. and press Enter. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 47 In the drawing area. and then press Esc.25. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. you can ensure that they stay together. enter 0 0. while pressing Ctrl. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. Using the same method.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. for Name.

56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 54 Select the group. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 52 Select the detail group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. TP-2B. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations.51 Using the method learned previously. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 .

Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). In later exercises. for Name. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. and click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. and will place it on sheet E01. click Training Files. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment.rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 2 Right-click the copy. and click Rename. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 5 Zoom in to view the section. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and then press Esc. 7 On the ViewCube.6 Select the section box. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and then click the corner where the Top. click Home. Back. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and Left sides converge.

Under Names. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Walkthroughs. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Click OK. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. select 3D Views. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Apply View Template. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. right-click. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select 3D HVAC Iso.

16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Move the cursor down and to the left. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 15 Using the same method. as shown. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. (Right). Typical. 19 Complete the text labels. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. and click to specify the second leader point.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader.

open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS.To rotate and reposition a text label. select Crop Region Visible. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Extents. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. as shown. and then click OK. 25 Click OK. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and under Extents. 23 Click on the crop region. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet.

select 3" = 1'-0".29 In the drawing area. click Training Files. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail.rvt. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). select the isometric view. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. For Scale. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 In the Project Browser. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Place a detail component. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. and click Properties. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. right-click the view name. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise.

6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. as the rectangle start point. 12 On the Element panel. 13 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. click the point at the top of the drain. as shown. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select Documentation. Click OK. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 9 Zoom in to the component. For View Classification. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Plumbing. for Sub-Discipline.

20 Select 1.P. select C. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. and then press Esc. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. (Line). Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . and click OK. 23 In the drawing area. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 18 With the filled region still selected.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 In the drawing area. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 22 Click Modify. for Type. Concrete.I. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. select the filled region.

29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 31 On the Options Bar. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Multiple. and then click to select them. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab.28 Click Modify. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 34 Press Esc.

44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 45 Using the method learned previously. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. (Rectangle). The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. and then press Esc. 40 Click Finish Region.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2.

48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 49 Click Modify. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.. for Name. and click OK.D. and then click to select them. draw wide detail lines as shown. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. press Tab to highlight the chain. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select the Flashing Membrane group.

55 Press Esc. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 61 Using the same method. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . as shown. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down.

69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. as shown. and then click OK. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 67 On the Options Bar. select Leader and Free End. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 71 Click Modify.62 Press Esc twice. 64 Press Esc twice. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 72 If necessary. and use the grips to resize the masking region.

79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 81 Select the text note. 76 To select the leader start point. 80 Press Esc twice. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and click to specify the text insertion point. and click to specify the second leader point. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. as shown. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.82 Continue annotating the detail. 84 Using the following image as a guide. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.

Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 88 In the drawing area.Plumbing Part Plans & Details.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. and click to place it. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the view title. and then press Esc twice. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. open P103 . 90 Press Esc.

and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For A-----NPP. Click Open. For Colors. select 3. click Training Files. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise.rvt. you import a CAD detail drawing. For Import units. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. select Visible. select Black and White. Click OK. For Layers. select Auto-Detect. for Line Weight. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial.dwg. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view.

11 Press Esc. 12 In the drawing area. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. select the viewport title. and then press Esc. open P103 . and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.8 Type ZF.Plumbing Part Plans & Details.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful